public inbox for [email protected]help / color / mirror / Atom feed
[PATCH 06/21] One fewer (not one less) 24+ messages / 2 participants [nested] [flat]
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) @ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw) --- contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +- src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++-- src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +- src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +- src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++-- src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +- src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +- src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +- 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-) diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644 --- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c +++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata, attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i); /* - * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as + * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR"; name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique within a given database even though it would not be unique globally. Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will - make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to + make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>, <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of the database encoding. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml @@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were - therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.) + therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.) While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml @@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS <para> The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting - in more or less query trees. + in additional or fewer query trees. So a rule's actions must have either a different command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop. diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c +++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c @@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest) } /* - * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute + * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL. * - * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number. + * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number. * * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The * other argument must be NULL. diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c @@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr) * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many). * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create - * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the + * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the * sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2, * implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an * index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve * consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results. - * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function, + * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function, * such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of * SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have * an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq, /* * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case. - * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for + * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c @@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache, * It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns * here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so * you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes - * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. + * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. * * The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples, * and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize, bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */ /* - * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much + * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it. */ bs->n = samplesize; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm) * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased) - * or one less (if the first key increased). + * or one fewer (if the first key increased). */ static void FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp) diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644 --- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c +++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c @@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg) /* * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state, - * that's one less client that remains. + * that's one fewer client that remains. */ if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED) remains--; diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644 --- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h +++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * Changing this requires an initdb. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ /* * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence, - * maximum usable pathname length is one less). + * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer). * * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out +++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out @@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; <(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365)) (6 rows) --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; ERROR: must request at least 2 points -- Zero radius error diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql +++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql @@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- To polygon with less points SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- Zero radius error -- 2.17.0 --lc9FT7cWel8HagAv Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii Content-Disposition: attachment; filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch" ^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) @ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw) --- contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +- src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++-- src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +- src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +- src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++-- src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +- src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +- src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +- 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-) diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644 --- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c +++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata, attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i); /* - * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as + * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR"; name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique within a given database even though it would not be unique globally. Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will - make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to + make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>, <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of the database encoding. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml @@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were - therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.) + therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.) While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml @@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS <para> The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting - in more or less query trees. + in additional or fewer query trees. So a rule's actions must have either a different command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop. diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c +++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c @@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest) } /* - * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute + * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL. * - * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number. + * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number. * * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The * other argument must be NULL. diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c @@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr) * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many). * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create - * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the + * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the * sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2, * implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an * index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve * consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results. - * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function, + * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function, * such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of * SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have * an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq, /* * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case. - * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for + * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c @@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache, * It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns * here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so * you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes - * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. + * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. * * The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples, * and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize, bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */ /* - * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much + * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it. */ bs->n = samplesize; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm) * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased) - * or one less (if the first key increased). + * or one fewer (if the first key increased). */ static void FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp) diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644 --- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c +++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c @@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg) /* * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state, - * that's one less client that remains. + * that's one fewer client that remains. */ if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED) remains--; diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644 --- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h +++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * Changing this requires an initdb. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ /* * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence, - * maximum usable pathname length is one less). + * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer). * * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out +++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out @@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; <(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365)) (6 rows) --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; ERROR: must request at least 2 points -- Zero radius error diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql +++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql @@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- To polygon with less points SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- Zero radius error -- 2.17.0 --lc9FT7cWel8HagAv Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii Content-Disposition: attachment; filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch" ^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) @ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw) --- contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +- src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++-- src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +- src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +- src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++-- src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +- src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +- src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +- 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-) diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644 --- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c +++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata, attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i); /* - * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as + * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR"; name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique within a given database even though it would not be unique globally. Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will - make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to + make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>, <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of the database encoding. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml @@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were - therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.) + therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.) While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml @@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS <para> The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting - in more or less query trees. + in additional or fewer query trees. So a rule's actions must have either a different command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop. diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c +++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c @@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest) } /* - * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute + * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL. * - * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number. + * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number. * * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The * other argument must be NULL. diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c @@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr) * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many). * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create - * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the + * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the * sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2, * implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an * index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve * consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results. - * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function, + * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function, * such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of * SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have * an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq, /* * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case. - * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for + * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c @@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache, * It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns * here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so * you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes - * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. + * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. * * The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples, * and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize, bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */ /* - * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much + * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it. */ bs->n = samplesize; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm) * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased) - * or one less (if the first key increased). + * or one fewer (if the first key increased). */ static void FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp) diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644 --- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c +++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c @@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg) /* * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state, - * that's one less client that remains. + * that's one fewer client that remains. */ if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED) remains--; diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644 --- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h +++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * Changing this requires an initdb. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ /* * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence, - * maximum usable pathname length is one less). + * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer). * * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out +++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out @@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; <(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365)) (6 rows) --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; ERROR: must request at least 2 points -- Zero radius error diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql +++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql @@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- To polygon with less points SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- Zero radius error -- 2.17.0 --lc9FT7cWel8HagAv Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii Content-Disposition: attachment; filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch" ^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) @ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw) --- contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +- src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++-- src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +- src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +- src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++-- src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +- src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +- src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +- 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-) diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644 --- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c +++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata, attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i); /* - * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as + * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR"; name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique within a given database even though it would not be unique globally. Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will - make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to + make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>, <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of the database encoding. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml @@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were - therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.) + therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.) While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml @@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS <para> The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting - in more or less query trees. + in additional or fewer query trees. So a rule's actions must have either a different command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop. diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c +++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c @@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest) } /* - * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute + * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL. * - * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number. + * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number. * * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The * other argument must be NULL. diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c @@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr) * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many). * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create - * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the + * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the * sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2, * implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an * index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve * consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results. - * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function, + * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function, * such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of * SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have * an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq, /* * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case. - * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for + * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c @@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache, * It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns * here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so * you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes - * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. + * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. * * The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples, * and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize, bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */ /* - * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much + * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it. */ bs->n = samplesize; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm) * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased) - * or one less (if the first key increased). + * or one fewer (if the first key increased). */ static void FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp) diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644 --- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c +++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c @@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg) /* * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state, - * that's one less client that remains. + * that's one fewer client that remains. */ if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED) remains--; diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644 --- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h +++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * Changing this requires an initdb. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ /* * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence, - * maximum usable pathname length is one less). + * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer). * * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out +++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out @@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; <(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365)) (6 rows) --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; ERROR: must request at least 2 points -- Zero radius error diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql +++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql @@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- To polygon with less points SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- Zero radius error -- 2.17.0 --lc9FT7cWel8HagAv Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii Content-Disposition: attachment; filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch" ^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) @ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw) --- contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +- src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++-- src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +- src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +- src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++-- src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +- src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +- src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +- 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-) diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644 --- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c +++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata, attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i); /* - * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as + * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR"; name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique within a given database even though it would not be unique globally. Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will - make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to + make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>, <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of the database encoding. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml @@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were - therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.) + therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.) While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml @@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS <para> The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting - in more or less query trees. + in additional or fewer query trees. So a rule's actions must have either a different command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop. diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c +++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c @@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest) } /* - * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute + * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL. * - * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number. + * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number. * * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The * other argument must be NULL. diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c @@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr) * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many). * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create - * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the + * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the * sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2, * implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an * index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve * consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results. - * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function, + * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function, * such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of * SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have * an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq, /* * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case. - * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for + * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c @@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache, * It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns * here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so * you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes - * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. + * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. * * The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples, * and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize, bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */ /* - * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much + * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it. */ bs->n = samplesize; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm) * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased) - * or one less (if the first key increased). + * or one fewer (if the first key increased). */ static void FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp) diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644 --- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c +++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c @@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg) /* * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state, - * that's one less client that remains. + * that's one fewer client that remains. */ if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED) remains--; diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644 --- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h +++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * Changing this requires an initdb. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ /* * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence, - * maximum usable pathname length is one less). + * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer). * * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out +++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out @@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; <(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365)) (6 rows) --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; ERROR: must request at least 2 points -- Zero radius error diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql +++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql @@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- To polygon with less points SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- Zero radius error -- 2.17.0 --lc9FT7cWel8HagAv Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii Content-Disposition: attachment; filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch" ^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) @ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw) --- contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +- src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++-- src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +- src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +- src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++-- src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +- src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +- src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +- 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-) diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644 --- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c +++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata, attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i); /* - * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as + * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR"; name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique within a given database even though it would not be unique globally. Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will - make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to + make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>, <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of the database encoding. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml @@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were - therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.) + therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.) While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml @@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS <para> The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting - in more or less query trees. + in additional or fewer query trees. So a rule's actions must have either a different command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop. diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c +++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c @@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest) } /* - * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute + * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL. * - * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number. + * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number. * * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The * other argument must be NULL. diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c @@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr) * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many). * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create - * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the + * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the * sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2, * implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an * index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve * consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results. - * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function, + * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function, * such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of * SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have * an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq, /* * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case. - * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for + * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c @@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache, * It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns * here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so * you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes - * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. + * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. * * The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples, * and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize, bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */ /* - * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much + * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it. */ bs->n = samplesize; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm) * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased) - * or one less (if the first key increased). + * or one fewer (if the first key increased). */ static void FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp) diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644 --- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c +++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c @@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg) /* * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state, - * that's one less client that remains. + * that's one fewer client that remains. */ if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED) remains--; diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644 --- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h +++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * Changing this requires an initdb. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ /* * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence, - * maximum usable pathname length is one less). + * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer). * * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out +++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out @@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; <(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365)) (6 rows) --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; ERROR: must request at least 2 points -- Zero radius error diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql +++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql @@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- To polygon with less points SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- Zero radius error -- 2.17.0 --lc9FT7cWel8HagAv Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii Content-Disposition: attachment; filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch" ^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) @ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw) --- contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +- src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++-- src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +- src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +- src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++-- src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +- src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +- src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +- 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-) diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644 --- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c +++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata, attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i); /* - * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as + * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR"; name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique within a given database even though it would not be unique globally. Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will - make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to + make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>, <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of the database encoding. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml @@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were - therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.) + therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.) While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml @@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS <para> The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting - in more or less query trees. + in additional or fewer query trees. So a rule's actions must have either a different command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop. diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c +++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c @@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest) } /* - * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute + * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL. * - * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number. + * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number. * * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The * other argument must be NULL. diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c @@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr) * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many). * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create - * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the + * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the * sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2, * implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an * index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve * consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results. - * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function, + * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function, * such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of * SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have * an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq, /* * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case. - * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for + * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c @@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache, * It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns * here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so * you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes - * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. + * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. * * The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples, * and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize, bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */ /* - * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much + * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it. */ bs->n = samplesize; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm) * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased) - * or one less (if the first key increased). + * or one fewer (if the first key increased). */ static void FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp) diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644 --- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c +++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c @@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg) /* * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state, - * that's one less client that remains. + * that's one fewer client that remains. */ if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED) remains--; diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644 --- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h +++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * Changing this requires an initdb. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ /* * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence, - * maximum usable pathname length is one less). + * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer). * * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out +++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out @@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; <(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365)) (6 rows) --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; ERROR: must request at least 2 points -- Zero radius error diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql +++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql @@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- To polygon with less points SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- Zero radius error -- 2.17.0 --lc9FT7cWel8HagAv Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii Content-Disposition: attachment; filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch" ^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) @ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw) --- contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +- src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++-- src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +- src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +- src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++-- src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +- src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +- src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +- 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-) diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644 --- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c +++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata, attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i); /* - * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as + * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR"; name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique within a given database even though it would not be unique globally. Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will - make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to + make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>, <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of the database encoding. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml @@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were - therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.) + therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.) While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml @@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS <para> The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting - in more or less query trees. + in additional or fewer query trees. So a rule's actions must have either a different command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop. diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c +++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c @@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest) } /* - * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute + * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL. * - * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number. + * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number. * * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The * other argument must be NULL. diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c @@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr) * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many). * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create - * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the + * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the * sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2, * implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an * index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve * consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results. - * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function, + * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function, * such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of * SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have * an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq, /* * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case. - * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for + * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c @@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache, * It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns * here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so * you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes - * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. + * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. * * The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples, * and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize, bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */ /* - * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much + * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it. */ bs->n = samplesize; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm) * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased) - * or one less (if the first key increased). + * or one fewer (if the first key increased). */ static void FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp) diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644 --- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c +++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c @@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg) /* * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state, - * that's one less client that remains. + * that's one fewer client that remains. */ if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED) remains--; diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644 --- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h +++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * Changing this requires an initdb. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ /* * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence, - * maximum usable pathname length is one less). + * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer). * * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out +++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out @@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; <(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365)) (6 rows) --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; ERROR: must request at least 2 points -- Zero radius error diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql +++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql @@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- To polygon with less points SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- Zero radius error -- 2.17.0 --lc9FT7cWel8HagAv Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii Content-Disposition: attachment; filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch" ^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/21] One fewer (not one less) @ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw) --- contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +- src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++-- src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +- src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +- src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++-- src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +- src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +- src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +- 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-) diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644 --- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c +++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata, attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i); /* - * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as + * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR"; name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique within a given database even though it would not be unique globally. Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will - make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to + make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>, <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of the database encoding. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml @@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were - therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.) + therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.) While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml @@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS <para> The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting - in more or less query trees. + in additional or fewer query trees. So a rule's actions must have either a different command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop. diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c +++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c @@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest) } /* - * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute + * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL. * - * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number. + * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number. * * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The * other argument must be NULL. diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c @@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr) * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many). * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create - * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the + * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the * sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2, * implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an * index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve * consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results. - * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function, + * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function, * such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of * SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have * an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq, /* * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case. - * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for + * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c @@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache, * It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns * here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so * you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes - * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. + * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. * * The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples, * and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize, bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */ /* - * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much + * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it. */ bs->n = samplesize; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm) * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased) - * or one less (if the first key increased). + * or one fewer (if the first key increased). */ static void FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp) diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644 --- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c +++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c @@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg) /* * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state, - * that's one less client that remains. + * that's one fewer client that remains. */ if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED) remains--; diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h index 2a12071bad..7413748a71 100644 --- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h +++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * Changing this requires an initdb. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ /* * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence, - * maximum usable pathname length is one less). + * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer). * * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out +++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out @@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; <(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365)) (6 rows) --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; ERROR: must request at least 2 points -- Zero radius error diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql +++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql @@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- To polygon with less points SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- Zero radius error -- 2.17.0 --jI8keyz6grp/JLjh Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii Content-Disposition: attachment; filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch" ^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) @ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw) --- contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +- src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++-- src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +- src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +- src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++-- src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +- src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +- src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +- 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-) diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644 --- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c +++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata, attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i); /* - * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as + * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR"; name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique within a given database even though it would not be unique globally. Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will - make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to + make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>, <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of the database encoding. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml @@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were - therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.) + therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.) While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml @@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS <para> The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting - in more or less query trees. + in additional or fewer query trees. So a rule's actions must have either a different command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop. diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c +++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c @@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest) } /* - * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute + * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL. * - * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number. + * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number. * * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The * other argument must be NULL. diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c @@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr) * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many). * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create - * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the + * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the * sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2, * implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an * index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve * consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results. - * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function, + * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function, * such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of * SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have * an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq, /* * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case. - * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for + * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c @@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache, * It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns * here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so * you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes - * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. + * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. * * The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples, * and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize, bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */ /* - * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much + * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it. */ bs->n = samplesize; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm) * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased) - * or one less (if the first key increased). + * or one fewer (if the first key increased). */ static void FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp) diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644 --- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c +++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c @@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg) /* * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state, - * that's one less client that remains. + * that's one fewer client that remains. */ if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED) remains--; diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644 --- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h +++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * Changing this requires an initdb. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ /* * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence, - * maximum usable pathname length is one less). + * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer). * * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out +++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out @@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; <(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365)) (6 rows) --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; ERROR: must request at least 2 points -- Zero radius error diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql +++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql @@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- To polygon with less points SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- Zero radius error -- 2.17.0 --lc9FT7cWel8HagAv Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii Content-Disposition: attachment; filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch" ^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) @ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw) --- contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +- src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++-- src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +- src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +- src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++-- src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +- src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +- src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +- 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-) diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644 --- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c +++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata, attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i); /* - * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as + * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR"; name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique within a given database even though it would not be unique globally. Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will - make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to + make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>, <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of the database encoding. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml @@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were - therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.) + therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.) While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml @@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS <para> The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting - in more or less query trees. + in additional or fewer query trees. So a rule's actions must have either a different command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop. diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c +++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c @@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest) } /* - * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute + * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL. * - * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number. + * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number. * * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The * other argument must be NULL. diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c @@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr) * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many). * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create - * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the + * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the * sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2, * implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an * index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve * consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results. - * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function, + * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function, * such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of * SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have * an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq, /* * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case. - * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for + * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c @@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache, * It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns * here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so * you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes - * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. + * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. * * The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples, * and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize, bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */ /* - * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much + * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it. */ bs->n = samplesize; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm) * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased) - * or one less (if the first key increased). + * or one fewer (if the first key increased). */ static void FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp) diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644 --- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c +++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c @@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg) /* * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state, - * that's one less client that remains. + * that's one fewer client that remains. */ if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED) remains--; diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644 --- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h +++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * Changing this requires an initdb. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ /* * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence, - * maximum usable pathname length is one less). + * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer). * * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out +++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out @@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; <(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365)) (6 rows) --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; ERROR: must request at least 2 points -- Zero radius error diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql +++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql @@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- To polygon with less points SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- Zero radius error -- 2.17.0 --lc9FT7cWel8HagAv Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii Content-Disposition: attachment; filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch" ^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) @ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw) --- contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +- src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++-- src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +- src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +- src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++-- src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +- src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +- src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +- 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-) diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644 --- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c +++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata, attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i); /* - * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as + * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR"; name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique within a given database even though it would not be unique globally. Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will - make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to + make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>, <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of the database encoding. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml @@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were - therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.) + therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.) While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml @@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS <para> The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting - in more or less query trees. + in additional or fewer query trees. So a rule's actions must have either a different command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop. diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c +++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c @@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest) } /* - * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute + * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL. * - * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number. + * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number. * * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The * other argument must be NULL. diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c @@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr) * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many). * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create - * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the + * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the * sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2, * implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an * index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve * consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results. - * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function, + * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function, * such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of * SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have * an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq, /* * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case. - * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for + * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c @@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache, * It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns * here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so * you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes - * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. + * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. * * The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples, * and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize, bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */ /* - * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much + * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it. */ bs->n = samplesize; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm) * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased) - * or one less (if the first key increased). + * or one fewer (if the first key increased). */ static void FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp) diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644 --- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c +++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c @@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg) /* * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state, - * that's one less client that remains. + * that's one fewer client that remains. */ if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED) remains--; diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644 --- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h +++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * Changing this requires an initdb. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ /* * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence, - * maximum usable pathname length is one less). + * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer). * * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out +++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out @@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; <(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365)) (6 rows) --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; ERROR: must request at least 2 points -- Zero radius error diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql +++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql @@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- To polygon with less points SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- Zero radius error -- 2.17.0 --lc9FT7cWel8HagAv Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii Content-Disposition: attachment; filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch" ^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) @ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw) --- contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +- src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++-- src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +- src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +- src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++-- src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +- src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +- src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +- 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-) diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644 --- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c +++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata, attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i); /* - * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as + * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR"; name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique within a given database even though it would not be unique globally. Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will - make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to + make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>, <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of the database encoding. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml @@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were - therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.) + therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.) While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml @@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS <para> The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting - in more or less query trees. + in additional or fewer query trees. So a rule's actions must have either a different command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop. diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c +++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c @@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest) } /* - * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute + * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL. * - * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number. + * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number. * * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The * other argument must be NULL. diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c @@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr) * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many). * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create - * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the + * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the * sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2, * implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an * index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve * consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results. - * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function, + * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function, * such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of * SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have * an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq, /* * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case. - * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for + * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c @@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache, * It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns * here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so * you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes - * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. + * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. * * The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples, * and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize, bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */ /* - * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much + * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it. */ bs->n = samplesize; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm) * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased) - * or one less (if the first key increased). + * or one fewer (if the first key increased). */ static void FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp) diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644 --- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c +++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c @@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg) /* * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state, - * that's one less client that remains. + * that's one fewer client that remains. */ if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED) remains--; diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644 --- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h +++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * Changing this requires an initdb. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ /* * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence, - * maximum usable pathname length is one less). + * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer). * * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out +++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out @@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; <(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365)) (6 rows) --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; ERROR: must request at least 2 points -- Zero radius error diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql +++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql @@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- To polygon with less points SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- Zero radius error -- 2.17.0 --lc9FT7cWel8HagAv Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii Content-Disposition: attachment; filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch" ^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) @ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw) --- contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +- src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++-- src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +- src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +- src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++-- src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +- src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +- src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +- 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-) diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644 --- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c +++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata, attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i); /* - * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as + * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR"; name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique within a given database even though it would not be unique globally. Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will - make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to + make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>, <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of the database encoding. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml @@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were - therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.) + therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.) While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml @@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS <para> The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting - in more or less query trees. + in additional or fewer query trees. So a rule's actions must have either a different command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop. diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c +++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c @@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest) } /* - * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute + * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL. * - * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number. + * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number. * * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The * other argument must be NULL. diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c @@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr) * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many). * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create - * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the + * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the * sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2, * implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an * index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve * consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results. - * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function, + * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function, * such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of * SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have * an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq, /* * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case. - * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for + * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c @@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache, * It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns * here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so * you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes - * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. + * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. * * The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples, * and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize, bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */ /* - * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much + * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it. */ bs->n = samplesize; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm) * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased) - * or one less (if the first key increased). + * or one fewer (if the first key increased). */ static void FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp) diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644 --- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c +++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c @@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg) /* * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state, - * that's one less client that remains. + * that's one fewer client that remains. */ if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED) remains--; diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644 --- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h +++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * Changing this requires an initdb. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ /* * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence, - * maximum usable pathname length is one less). + * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer). * * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out +++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out @@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; <(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365)) (6 rows) --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; ERROR: must request at least 2 points -- Zero radius error diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql +++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql @@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- To polygon with less points SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- Zero radius error -- 2.17.0 --lc9FT7cWel8HagAv Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii Content-Disposition: attachment; filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch" ^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) @ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw) --- contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +- src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++-- src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +- src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +- src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++-- src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +- src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +- src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +- 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-) diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644 --- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c +++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata, attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i); /* - * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as + * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR"; name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique within a given database even though it would not be unique globally. Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will - make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to + make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>, <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of the database encoding. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml @@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were - therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.) + therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.) While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml @@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS <para> The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting - in more or less query trees. + in additional or fewer query trees. So a rule's actions must have either a different command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop. diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c +++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c @@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest) } /* - * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute + * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL. * - * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number. + * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number. * * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The * other argument must be NULL. diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c @@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr) * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many). * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create - * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the + * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the * sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2, * implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an * index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve * consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results. - * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function, + * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function, * such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of * SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have * an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq, /* * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case. - * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for + * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c @@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache, * It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns * here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so * you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes - * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. + * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. * * The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples, * and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize, bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */ /* - * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much + * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it. */ bs->n = samplesize; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm) * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased) - * or one less (if the first key increased). + * or one fewer (if the first key increased). */ static void FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp) diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644 --- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c +++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c @@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg) /* * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state, - * that's one less client that remains. + * that's one fewer client that remains. */ if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED) remains--; diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644 --- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h +++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * Changing this requires an initdb. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ /* * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence, - * maximum usable pathname length is one less). + * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer). * * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out +++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out @@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; <(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365)) (6 rows) --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; ERROR: must request at least 2 points -- Zero radius error diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql +++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql @@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- To polygon with less points SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- Zero radius error -- 2.17.0 --lc9FT7cWel8HagAv Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii Content-Disposition: attachment; filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch" ^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) @ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw) --- contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +- src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++-- src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +- src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +- src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++-- src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +- src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +- src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +- 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-) diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644 --- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c +++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata, attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i); /* - * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as + * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR"; name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique within a given database even though it would not be unique globally. Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will - make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to + make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>, <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of the database encoding. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml @@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were - therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.) + therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.) While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml @@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS <para> The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting - in more or less query trees. + in additional or fewer query trees. So a rule's actions must have either a different command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop. diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c +++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c @@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest) } /* - * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute + * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL. * - * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number. + * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number. * * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The * other argument must be NULL. diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c @@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr) * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many). * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create - * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the + * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the * sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2, * implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an * index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve * consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results. - * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function, + * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function, * such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of * SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have * an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq, /* * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case. - * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for + * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c @@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache, * It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns * here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so * you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes - * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. + * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. * * The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples, * and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize, bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */ /* - * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much + * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it. */ bs->n = samplesize; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm) * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased) - * or one less (if the first key increased). + * or one fewer (if the first key increased). */ static void FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp) diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644 --- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c +++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c @@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg) /* * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state, - * that's one less client that remains. + * that's one fewer client that remains. */ if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED) remains--; diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644 --- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h +++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * Changing this requires an initdb. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ /* * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence, - * maximum usable pathname length is one less). + * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer). * * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out +++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out @@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; <(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365)) (6 rows) --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; ERROR: must request at least 2 points -- Zero radius error diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql +++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql @@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- To polygon with less points SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- Zero radius error -- 2.17.0 --lc9FT7cWel8HagAv Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii Content-Disposition: attachment; filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch" ^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) @ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw) --- contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +- src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++-- src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +- src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +- src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++-- src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +- src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +- src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +- 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-) diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644 --- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c +++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata, attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i); /* - * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as + * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR"; name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique within a given database even though it would not be unique globally. Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will - make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to + make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>, <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of the database encoding. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml @@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were - therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.) + therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.) While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml @@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS <para> The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting - in more or less query trees. + in additional or fewer query trees. So a rule's actions must have either a different command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop. diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c +++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c @@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest) } /* - * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute + * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL. * - * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number. + * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number. * * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The * other argument must be NULL. diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c @@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr) * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many). * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create - * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the + * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the * sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2, * implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an * index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve * consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results. - * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function, + * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function, * such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of * SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have * an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq, /* * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case. - * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for + * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c @@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache, * It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns * here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so * you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes - * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. + * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. * * The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples, * and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize, bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */ /* - * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much + * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it. */ bs->n = samplesize; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm) * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased) - * or one less (if the first key increased). + * or one fewer (if the first key increased). */ static void FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp) diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644 --- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c +++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c @@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg) /* * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state, - * that's one less client that remains. + * that's one fewer client that remains. */ if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED) remains--; diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644 --- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h +++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * Changing this requires an initdb. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ /* * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence, - * maximum usable pathname length is one less). + * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer). * * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out +++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out @@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; <(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365)) (6 rows) --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; ERROR: must request at least 2 points -- Zero radius error diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql +++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql @@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- To polygon with less points SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- Zero radius error -- 2.17.0 --lc9FT7cWel8HagAv Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii Content-Disposition: attachment; filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch" ^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) @ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw) --- contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +- src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++-- src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +- src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +- src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++-- src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +- src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +- src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +- 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-) diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644 --- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c +++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata, attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i); /* - * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as + * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR"; name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique within a given database even though it would not be unique globally. Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will - make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to + make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>, <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of the database encoding. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml @@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were - therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.) + therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.) While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml @@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS <para> The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting - in more or less query trees. + in additional or fewer query trees. So a rule's actions must have either a different command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop. diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c +++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c @@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest) } /* - * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute + * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL. * - * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number. + * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number. * * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The * other argument must be NULL. diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c @@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr) * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many). * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create - * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the + * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the * sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2, * implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an * index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve * consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results. - * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function, + * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function, * such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of * SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have * an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq, /* * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case. - * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for + * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c @@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache, * It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns * here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so * you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes - * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. + * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. * * The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples, * and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize, bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */ /* - * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much + * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it. */ bs->n = samplesize; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm) * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased) - * or one less (if the first key increased). + * or one fewer (if the first key increased). */ static void FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp) diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644 --- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c +++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c @@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg) /* * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state, - * that's one less client that remains. + * that's one fewer client that remains. */ if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED) remains--; diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644 --- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h +++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * Changing this requires an initdb. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ /* * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence, - * maximum usable pathname length is one less). + * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer). * * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out +++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out @@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; <(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365)) (6 rows) --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; ERROR: must request at least 2 points -- Zero radius error diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql +++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql @@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- To polygon with less points SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- Zero radius error -- 2.17.0 --lc9FT7cWel8HagAv Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii Content-Disposition: attachment; filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch" ^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) @ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw) --- contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +- src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++-- src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +- src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +- src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++-- src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +- src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +- src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +- 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-) diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644 --- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c +++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata, attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i); /* - * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as + * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR"; name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique within a given database even though it would not be unique globally. Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will - make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to + make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>, <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of the database encoding. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml @@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were - therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.) + therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.) While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml @@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS <para> The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting - in more or less query trees. + in additional or fewer query trees. So a rule's actions must have either a different command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop. diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c +++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c @@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest) } /* - * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute + * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL. * - * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number. + * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number. * * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The * other argument must be NULL. diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c @@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr) * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many). * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create - * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the + * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the * sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2, * implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an * index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve * consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results. - * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function, + * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function, * such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of * SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have * an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq, /* * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case. - * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for + * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c @@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache, * It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns * here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so * you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes - * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. + * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. * * The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples, * and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize, bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */ /* - * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much + * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it. */ bs->n = samplesize; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm) * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased) - * or one less (if the first key increased). + * or one fewer (if the first key increased). */ static void FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp) diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644 --- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c +++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c @@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg) /* * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state, - * that's one less client that remains. + * that's one fewer client that remains. */ if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED) remains--; diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644 --- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h +++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * Changing this requires an initdb. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ /* * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence, - * maximum usable pathname length is one less). + * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer). * * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out +++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out @@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; <(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365)) (6 rows) --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; ERROR: must request at least 2 points -- Zero radius error diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql +++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql @@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- To polygon with less points SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- Zero radius error -- 2.17.0 --lc9FT7cWel8HagAv Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii Content-Disposition: attachment; filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch" ^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) @ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw) --- contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +- src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++-- src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +- src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +- src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++-- src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +- src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +- src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +- 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-) diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644 --- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c +++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata, attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i); /* - * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as + * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR"; name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique within a given database even though it would not be unique globally. Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will - make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to + make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>, <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of the database encoding. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml @@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were - therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.) + therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.) While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml @@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS <para> The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting - in more or less query trees. + in additional or fewer query trees. So a rule's actions must have either a different command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop. diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c +++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c @@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest) } /* - * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute + * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL. * - * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number. + * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number. * * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The * other argument must be NULL. diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c @@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr) * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many). * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create - * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the + * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the * sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2, * implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an * index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve * consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results. - * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function, + * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function, * such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of * SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have * an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq, /* * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case. - * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for + * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c @@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache, * It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns * here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so * you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes - * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. + * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. * * The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples, * and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize, bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */ /* - * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much + * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it. */ bs->n = samplesize; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm) * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased) - * or one less (if the first key increased). + * or one fewer (if the first key increased). */ static void FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp) diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644 --- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c +++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c @@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg) /* * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state, - * that's one less client that remains. + * that's one fewer client that remains. */ if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED) remains--; diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644 --- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h +++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * Changing this requires an initdb. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ /* * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence, - * maximum usable pathname length is one less). + * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer). * * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out +++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out @@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; <(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365)) (6 rows) --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; ERROR: must request at least 2 points -- Zero radius error diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql +++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql @@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- To polygon with less points SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- Zero radius error -- 2.17.0 --lc9FT7cWel8HagAv Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii Content-Disposition: attachment; filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch" ^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) @ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw) --- contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +- src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++-- src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +- src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +- src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++-- src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +- src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +- src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +- 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-) diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644 --- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c +++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata, attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i); /* - * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as + * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR"; name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique within a given database even though it would not be unique globally. Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will - make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to + make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>, <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of the database encoding. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml @@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were - therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.) + therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.) While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml @@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS <para> The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting - in more or less query trees. + in additional or fewer query trees. So a rule's actions must have either a different command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop. diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c +++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c @@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest) } /* - * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute + * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL. * - * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number. + * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number. * * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The * other argument must be NULL. diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c @@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr) * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many). * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create - * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the + * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the * sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2, * implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an * index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve * consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results. - * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function, + * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function, * such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of * SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have * an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq, /* * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case. - * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for + * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c @@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache, * It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns * here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so * you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes - * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. + * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. * * The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples, * and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize, bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */ /* - * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much + * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it. */ bs->n = samplesize; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm) * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased) - * or one less (if the first key increased). + * or one fewer (if the first key increased). */ static void FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp) diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644 --- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c +++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c @@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg) /* * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state, - * that's one less client that remains. + * that's one fewer client that remains. */ if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED) remains--; diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644 --- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h +++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * Changing this requires an initdb. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ /* * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence, - * maximum usable pathname length is one less). + * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer). * * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out +++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out @@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; <(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365)) (6 rows) --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; ERROR: must request at least 2 points -- Zero radius error diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql +++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql @@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- To polygon with less points SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- Zero radius error -- 2.17.0 --lc9FT7cWel8HagAv Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii Content-Disposition: attachment; filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch" ^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) @ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw) --- contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +- src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++-- src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +- src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +- src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++-- src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +- src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +- src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +- 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-) diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644 --- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c +++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata, attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i); /* - * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as + * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR"; name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique within a given database even though it would not be unique globally. Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will - make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to + make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>, <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of the database encoding. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml @@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were - therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.) + therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.) While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml @@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS <para> The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting - in more or less query trees. + in additional or fewer query trees. So a rule's actions must have either a different command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop. diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c +++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c @@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest) } /* - * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute + * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL. * - * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number. + * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number. * * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The * other argument must be NULL. diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c @@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr) * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many). * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create - * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the + * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the * sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2, * implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an * index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve * consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results. - * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function, + * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function, * such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of * SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have * an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq, /* * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case. - * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for + * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c @@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache, * It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns * here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so * you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes - * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. + * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. * * The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples, * and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize, bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */ /* - * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much + * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it. */ bs->n = samplesize; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm) * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased) - * or one less (if the first key increased). + * or one fewer (if the first key increased). */ static void FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp) diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644 --- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c +++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c @@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg) /* * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state, - * that's one less client that remains. + * that's one fewer client that remains. */ if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED) remains--; diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644 --- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h +++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * Changing this requires an initdb. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ /* * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence, - * maximum usable pathname length is one less). + * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer). * * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out +++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out @@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; <(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365)) (6 rows) --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; ERROR: must request at least 2 points -- Zero radius error diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql +++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql @@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- To polygon with less points SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- Zero radius error -- 2.17.0 --lc9FT7cWel8HagAv Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii Content-Disposition: attachment; filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch" ^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) @ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw) --- contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +- doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +- src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++-- src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +- src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +- src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +- src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++-- src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +- src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +- src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +- 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-) diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644 --- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c +++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata, attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i); /* - * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as + * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR"; name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique within a given database even though it would not be unique globally. Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will - make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to + make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>, <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of the database encoding. diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml @@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were - therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.) + therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.) While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644 --- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml +++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml @@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS <para> The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting - in more or less query trees. + in additional or fewer query trees. So a rule's actions must have either a different command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop. diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c +++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c @@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest) } /* - * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute + * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL. * - * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number. + * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number. * * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The * other argument must be NULL. diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c @@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr) * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many). * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create - * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the + * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the * sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2, * implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an * index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve * consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results. - * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function, + * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function, * such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of * SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have * an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq, /* * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case. - * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for + * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c @@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache, * It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns * here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so * you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes - * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. + * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does. * * The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples, * and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize, bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */ /* - * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much + * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it. */ bs->n = samplesize; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm) * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased) - * or one less (if the first key increased). + * or one fewer (if the first key increased). */ static void FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp) diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644 --- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c +++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c @@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg) /* * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state, - * that's one less client that remains. + * that's one fewer client that remains. */ if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED) remains--; diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644 --- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h +++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * Changing this requires an initdb. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ /* * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence, - * maximum usable pathname length is one less). + * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer). * * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ /* * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names, - * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this, + * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this, * because the length must include a trailing zero byte. * * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out +++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out @@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; <(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365)) (6 rows) --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; ERROR: must request at least 2 points -- Zero radius error diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql +++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql @@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- To polygon with less points SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; --- Too less points error +-- Too few points error SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>'; -- Zero radius error -- 2.17.0 --lc9FT7cWel8HagAv Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii Content-Disposition: attachment; filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch" ^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread
* Proposal to add page headers to SLRU pages @ 2023-12-07 07:06 Li, Yong <[email protected]> 0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread From: Li, Yong @ 2023-12-07 07:06 UTC (permalink / raw) To: PostgreSQL Hackers <[email protected]>; +Cc: Shyrabokau, Anton <[email protected]>; Debnath, Shawn <[email protected]> Hi all, PostgreSQL currently maintains several data structures in the SLRU cache. The current SLRU pages do not have any header, so it is impossible to checksum a page and verify its integrity. It is very difficult to debug issues caused by corrupted SLRU pages. Also, without a page header, page LSN is tracked in an ad-hoc fashion using LSN groups, which requires additional data structure in the shared memory. At eBay, we are building on the patch shared by Rishu Bagga in [1], which adds the standard PageHeaderData to each SLRU page. We believe that adding the standard page header to each SLRU page is the correct approach for the long run. It adds a checksum to each SLRU page, tracks page LSN as if it is a standard page and eases future page enhancements. The enclosed patch changes the address calculation logic for all 7 SLRUs in the following 6 files: src/backend/access/transam/clog.c src/backend/access/transam/commit_ts.c src/backend/access/transam/multixact.c src/backend/access/transam/subtrans.c src/backend/commands/async.c src/backend/storage/lmgr/predicate.c The patch enables page checksum with changes to the following 2 files: src/backend/access/transam/slru.c src/bin/pg_checksums/pg_checksums.c The patch removes the group LSNs defined for each SLRU cache. See changes to: src/include/access/slru.h The patch adds a few helper macros in the following files: src/backend/storage/page/bufpage.c src/include/storage/bufpage.h The patch updates some test cases: src/bin/pg_resetwal/t/001_basic.pl src/test/modules/test_slru/test_slru.c I am still working on patching the pg_upgrade. Just love to hear your thoughts on the idea and the current patch. Discussed with: Anton Shyrabokau and Shawn Debnath [1] https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/EFAAC0BE-27E9-4186-B925-79B7C696D5AC%40amazon.com Regards, Yong Attachments: [application/octet-stream] slru_add_page_header.patch (43.4K, ../../IA1PR07MB982925731C4C0B38DC8F2F7FB98BA@IA1PR07MB9829.namprd07.prod.outlook.com/3-slru_add_page_header.patch) download | inline diff: src/backend/access/transam/clog.c | 52 ++++++++------- src/backend/access/transam/commit_ts.c | 26 +++++--- src/backend/access/transam/multixact.c | 59 ++++++++++------- src/backend/access/transam/slru.c | 113 +++++++++++---------------------- src/backend/access/transam/subtrans.c | 12 ++-- src/backend/commands/async.c | 27 ++++---- src/backend/storage/lmgr/predicate.c | 16 +++-- src/backend/storage/page/bufpage.c | 25 ++++++++ src/bin/pg_checksums/pg_checksums.c | 9 +++ src/bin/pg_resetwal/t/001_basic.pl | 6 +- src/include/access/slru.h | 15 +---- src/include/storage/bufpage.h | 7 ++ src/test/modules/test_slru/test_slru.c | 13 ++-- 13 files changed, 197 insertions(+), 183 deletions(-) diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/clog.c b/src/backend/access/transam/clog.c index cc60eab1e2..639bb90a1c 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/transam/clog.c +++ b/src/backend/access/transam/clog.c @@ -41,6 +41,7 @@ #include "miscadmin.h" #include "pg_trace.h" #include "pgstat.h" +#include "storage/bufpage.h" #include "storage/proc.h" #include "storage/sync.h" @@ -59,7 +60,7 @@ /* We need two bits per xact, so four xacts fit in a byte */ #define CLOG_BITS_PER_XACT 2 #define CLOG_XACTS_PER_BYTE 4 -#define CLOG_XACTS_PER_PAGE (BLCKSZ * CLOG_XACTS_PER_BYTE) +#define CLOG_XACTS_PER_PAGE (CapacityOfPageContents * CLOG_XACTS_PER_BYTE) #define CLOG_XACT_BITMASK ((1 << CLOG_BITS_PER_XACT) - 1) @@ -77,13 +78,6 @@ TransactionIdToPage(TransactionId xid) #define TransactionIdToByte(xid) (TransactionIdToPgIndex(xid) / CLOG_XACTS_PER_BYTE) #define TransactionIdToBIndex(xid) ((xid) % (TransactionId) CLOG_XACTS_PER_BYTE) -/* We store the latest async LSN for each group of transactions */ -#define CLOG_XACTS_PER_LSN_GROUP 32 /* keep this a power of 2 */ -#define CLOG_LSNS_PER_PAGE (CLOG_XACTS_PER_PAGE / CLOG_XACTS_PER_LSN_GROUP) - -#define GetLSNIndex(slotno, xid) ((slotno) * CLOG_LSNS_PER_PAGE + \ - ((xid) % (TransactionId) CLOG_XACTS_PER_PAGE) / CLOG_XACTS_PER_LSN_GROUP) - /* * The number of subtransactions below which we consider to apply clog group * update optimization. Testing reveals that the number higher than this can @@ -101,7 +95,7 @@ static SlruCtlData XactCtlData; static int ZeroCLOGPage(int64 pageno, bool writeXlog); static bool CLOGPagePrecedes(int64 page1, int64 page2); -static void WriteZeroPageXlogRec(int64 pageno); +static XLogRecPtr WriteZeroPageXlogRec(int64 pageno); static void WriteTruncateXlogRec(int64 pageno, TransactionId oldestXact, Oid oldestXactDb); static void TransactionIdSetPageStatus(TransactionId xid, int nsubxids, @@ -583,8 +577,9 @@ TransactionIdSetStatusBit(TransactionId xid, XidStatus status, XLogRecPtr lsn, i char *byteptr; char byteval; char curval; + Page page = XactCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]; - byteptr = XactCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno] + byteno; + byteptr = PageGetContents(page) + byteno; curval = (*byteptr >> bshift) & CLOG_XACT_BITMASK; /* @@ -613,7 +608,7 @@ TransactionIdSetStatusBit(TransactionId xid, XidStatus status, XLogRecPtr lsn, i *byteptr = byteval; /* - * Update the group LSN if the transaction completion LSN is higher. + * Update the page LSN if the transaction completion LSN is higher. * * Note: lsn will be invalid when supplied during InRecovery processing, * so we don't need to do anything special to avoid LSN updates during @@ -622,10 +617,8 @@ TransactionIdSetStatusBit(TransactionId xid, XidStatus status, XLogRecPtr lsn, i */ if (!XLogRecPtrIsInvalid(lsn)) { - int lsnindex = GetLSNIndex(slotno, xid); - - if (XactCtl->shared->group_lsn[lsnindex] < lsn) - XactCtl->shared->group_lsn[lsnindex] = lsn; + if (PageGetLSN(page) < lsn) + PageSetLSN(page, lsn); } } @@ -651,19 +644,19 @@ TransactionIdGetStatus(TransactionId xid, XLogRecPtr *lsn) int byteno = TransactionIdToByte(xid); int bshift = TransactionIdToBIndex(xid) * CLOG_BITS_PER_XACT; int slotno; - int lsnindex; + Page page; char *byteptr; XidStatus status; /* lock is acquired by SimpleLruReadPage_ReadOnly */ slotno = SimpleLruReadPage_ReadOnly(XactCtl, pageno, xid); - byteptr = XactCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno] + byteno; + page = XactCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]; + byteptr = PageGetContents(page) + byteno; status = (*byteptr >> bshift) & CLOG_XACT_BITMASK; - lsnindex = GetLSNIndex(slotno, xid); - *lsn = XactCtl->shared->group_lsn[lsnindex]; + *lsn = PageGetLSN(page); LWLockRelease(XactSLRULock); @@ -698,14 +691,14 @@ CLOGShmemBuffers(void) Size CLOGShmemSize(void) { - return SimpleLruShmemSize(CLOGShmemBuffers(), CLOG_LSNS_PER_PAGE); + return SimpleLruShmemSize(CLOGShmemBuffers()); } void CLOGShmemInit(void) { XactCtl->PagePrecedes = CLOGPagePrecedes; - SimpleLruInit(XactCtl, "Xact", CLOGShmemBuffers(), CLOG_LSNS_PER_PAGE, + SimpleLruInit(XactCtl, "Xact", CLOGShmemBuffers(), XactSLRULock, "pg_xact", LWTRANCHE_XACT_BUFFER, SYNC_HANDLER_CLOG, false); SlruPagePrecedesUnitTests(XactCtl, CLOG_XACTS_PER_PAGE); @@ -747,11 +740,17 @@ static int ZeroCLOGPage(int64 pageno, bool writeXlog) { int slotno; + Page page; + XLogRecPtr lsn = 0; slotno = SimpleLruZeroPage(XactCtl, pageno); + page = XactCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]; if (writeXlog) - WriteZeroPageXlogRec(pageno); + { + lsn = WriteZeroPageXlogRec(pageno); + PageSetLSN(page, lsn); + } return slotno; } @@ -807,12 +806,12 @@ TrimCLOG(void) char *byteptr; slotno = SimpleLruReadPage(XactCtl, pageno, false, xid); - byteptr = XactCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno] + byteno; + byteptr = PageGetContents(XactCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]) + byteno; /* Zero so-far-unused positions in the current byte */ *byteptr &= (1 << bshift) - 1; /* Zero the rest of the page */ - MemSet(byteptr + 1, 0, BLCKSZ - byteno - 1); + MemSet(byteptr + 1, 0, CapacityOfPageContents - byteno - 1); XactCtl->shared->page_dirty[slotno] = true; } @@ -836,7 +835,6 @@ CheckPointCLOG(void) TRACE_POSTGRESQL_CLOG_CHECKPOINT_DONE(true); } - /* * Make sure that CLOG has room for a newly-allocated XID. * @@ -958,12 +956,12 @@ CLOGPagePrecedes(int64 page1, int64 page2) /* * Write a ZEROPAGE xlog record */ -static void +static XLogRecPtr WriteZeroPageXlogRec(int64 pageno) { XLogBeginInsert(); XLogRegisterData((char *) (&pageno), sizeof(pageno)); - (void) XLogInsert(RM_CLOG_ID, CLOG_ZEROPAGE); + return XLogInsert(RM_CLOG_ID, CLOG_ZEROPAGE); } /* diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/commit_ts.c b/src/backend/access/transam/commit_ts.c index 7c642f7b59..3f01f10df5 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/transam/commit_ts.c +++ b/src/backend/access/transam/commit_ts.c @@ -31,6 +31,7 @@ #include "funcapi.h" #include "miscadmin.h" #include "pg_trace.h" +#include "storage/bufpage.h" #include "storage/shmem.h" #include "utils/builtins.h" #include "utils/snapmgr.h" @@ -63,7 +64,7 @@ typedef struct CommitTimestampEntry sizeof(RepOriginId)) #define COMMIT_TS_XACTS_PER_PAGE \ - (BLCKSZ / SizeOfCommitTimestampEntry) + (CapacityOfPageContents / SizeOfCommitTimestampEntry) /* @@ -120,7 +121,7 @@ static int ZeroCommitTsPage(int64 pageno, bool writeXlog); static bool CommitTsPagePrecedes(int64 page1, int64 page2); static void ActivateCommitTs(void); static void DeactivateCommitTs(void); -static void WriteZeroPageXlogRec(int64 pageno); +static XLogRecPtr WriteZeroPageXlogRec(int64 pageno); static void WriteTruncateXlogRec(int64 pageno, TransactionId oldestXid); /* @@ -254,11 +255,12 @@ TransactionIdSetCommitTs(TransactionId xid, TimestampTz ts, CommitTimestampEntry entry; Assert(TransactionIdIsNormal(xid)); + Assert(xid == slotno * COMMIT_TS_XACTS_PER_PAGE + entryno); entry.time = ts; entry.nodeid = nodeid; - memcpy(CommitTsCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno] + + memcpy(PageGetContents(CommitTsCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]) + SizeOfCommitTimestampEntry * entryno, &entry, SizeOfCommitTimestampEntry); } @@ -337,7 +339,7 @@ TransactionIdGetCommitTsData(TransactionId xid, TimestampTz *ts, /* lock is acquired by SimpleLruReadPage_ReadOnly */ slotno = SimpleLruReadPage_ReadOnly(CommitTsCtl, pageno, xid); memcpy(&entry, - CommitTsCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno] + + PageGetContents(CommitTsCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]) + SizeOfCommitTimestampEntry * entryno, SizeOfCommitTimestampEntry); @@ -515,7 +517,7 @@ CommitTsShmemBuffers(void) Size CommitTsShmemSize(void) { - return SimpleLruShmemSize(CommitTsShmemBuffers(), 0) + + return SimpleLruShmemSize(CommitTsShmemBuffers()) + sizeof(CommitTimestampShared); } @@ -529,7 +531,7 @@ CommitTsShmemInit(void) bool found; CommitTsCtl->PagePrecedes = CommitTsPagePrecedes; - SimpleLruInit(CommitTsCtl, "CommitTs", CommitTsShmemBuffers(), 0, + SimpleLruInit(CommitTsCtl, "CommitTs", CommitTsShmemBuffers(), CommitTsSLRULock, "pg_commit_ts", LWTRANCHE_COMMITTS_BUFFER, SYNC_HANDLER_COMMIT_TS, @@ -582,11 +584,17 @@ static int ZeroCommitTsPage(int64 pageno, bool writeXlog) { int slotno; + Page page; + XLogRecPtr lsn = 0; slotno = SimpleLruZeroPage(CommitTsCtl, pageno); + page = CommitTsCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]; if (writeXlog) - WriteZeroPageXlogRec(pageno); + { + lsn = WriteZeroPageXlogRec(pageno); + PageSetLSN(page, lsn); + } return slotno; } @@ -946,12 +954,12 @@ CommitTsPagePrecedes(int64 page1, int64 page2) /* * Write a ZEROPAGE xlog record */ -static void +static XLogRecPtr WriteZeroPageXlogRec(int64 pageno) { XLogBeginInsert(); XLogRegisterData((char *) (&pageno), sizeof(pageno)); - (void) XLogInsert(RM_COMMIT_TS_ID, COMMIT_TS_ZEROPAGE); + return XLogInsert(RM_COMMIT_TS_ID, COMMIT_TS_ZEROPAGE); } /* diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/multixact.c b/src/backend/access/transam/multixact.c index db3423f12e..edc56a763e 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/transam/multixact.c +++ b/src/backend/access/transam/multixact.c @@ -83,6 +83,7 @@ #include "miscadmin.h" #include "pg_trace.h" #include "postmaster/autovacuum.h" +#include "storage/bufpage.h" #include "storage/lmgr.h" #include "storage/pmsignal.h" #include "storage/proc.h" @@ -106,7 +107,7 @@ */ /* We need four bytes per offset */ -#define MULTIXACT_OFFSETS_PER_PAGE (BLCKSZ / sizeof(MultiXactOffset)) +#define MULTIXACT_OFFSETS_PER_PAGE (CapacityOfPageContents / sizeof(MultiXactOffset)) #define MultiXactIdToOffsetPage(xid) \ ((xid) / (MultiXactOffset) MULTIXACT_OFFSETS_PER_PAGE) @@ -138,7 +139,7 @@ /* size in bytes of a complete group */ #define MULTIXACT_MEMBERGROUP_SIZE \ (sizeof(TransactionId) * MULTIXACT_MEMBERS_PER_MEMBERGROUP + MULTIXACT_FLAGBYTES_PER_GROUP) -#define MULTIXACT_MEMBERGROUPS_PER_PAGE (BLCKSZ / MULTIXACT_MEMBERGROUP_SIZE) +#define MULTIXACT_MEMBERGROUPS_PER_PAGE (CapacityOfPageContents / MULTIXACT_MEMBERGROUP_SIZE) #define MULTIXACT_MEMBERS_PER_PAGE \ (MULTIXACT_MEMBERGROUPS_PER_PAGE * MULTIXACT_MEMBERS_PER_MEMBERGROUP) @@ -366,7 +367,7 @@ static bool MultiXactOffsetWouldWrap(MultiXactOffset boundary, MultiXactOffset start, uint32 distance); static bool SetOffsetVacuumLimit(bool is_startup); static bool find_multixact_start(MultiXactId multi, MultiXactOffset *result); -static void WriteMZeroPageXlogRec(int64 pageno, uint8 info); +static XLogRecPtr WriteMZeroPageXlogRec(int64 pageno, uint8 info); static void WriteMTruncateXlogRec(Oid oldestMultiDB, MultiXactId startTruncOff, MultiXactId endTruncOff, @@ -884,7 +885,7 @@ RecordNewMultiXact(MultiXactId multi, MultiXactOffset offset, * take the trouble to generalize the slru.c error reporting code. */ slotno = SimpleLruReadPage(MultiXactOffsetCtl, pageno, true, multi); - offptr = (MultiXactOffset *) MultiXactOffsetCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]; + offptr = (MultiXactOffset *) PageGetContents(MultiXactOffsetCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]); offptr += entryno; *offptr = offset; @@ -921,12 +922,12 @@ RecordNewMultiXact(MultiXactId multi, MultiXactOffset offset, } memberptr = (TransactionId *) - (MultiXactMemberCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno] + memberoff); + (PageGetContents(MultiXactMemberCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]) + memberoff); *memberptr = members[i].xid; flagsptr = (uint32 *) - (MultiXactMemberCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno] + flagsoff); + (PageGetContents(MultiXactMemberCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]) + flagsoff); flagsval = *flagsptr; flagsval &= ~(((1 << MXACT_MEMBER_BITS_PER_XACT) - 1) << bshift); @@ -1348,7 +1349,7 @@ retry: entryno = MultiXactIdToOffsetEntry(multi); slotno = SimpleLruReadPage(MultiXactOffsetCtl, pageno, true, multi); - offptr = (MultiXactOffset *) MultiXactOffsetCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]; + offptr = (MultiXactOffset *) PageGetContents(MultiXactOffsetCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]); offptr += entryno; offset = *offptr; @@ -1381,7 +1382,7 @@ retry: if (pageno != prev_pageno) slotno = SimpleLruReadPage(MultiXactOffsetCtl, pageno, true, tmpMXact); - offptr = (MultiXactOffset *) MultiXactOffsetCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]; + offptr = (MultiXactOffset *) PageGetContents(MultiXactOffsetCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]); offptr += entryno; nextMXOffset = *offptr; @@ -1424,7 +1425,7 @@ retry: } xactptr = (TransactionId *) - (MultiXactMemberCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno] + memberoff); + (PageGetContents(MultiXactMemberCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]) + memberoff); if (!TransactionIdIsValid(*xactptr)) { @@ -1435,7 +1436,7 @@ retry: flagsoff = MXOffsetToFlagsOffset(offset); bshift = MXOffsetToFlagsBitShift(offset); - flagsptr = (uint32 *) (MultiXactMemberCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno] + flagsoff); + flagsptr = (uint32 *) (PageGetContents(MultiXactMemberCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]) + flagsoff); ptr[truelength].xid = *xactptr; ptr[truelength].status = (*flagsptr >> bshift) & MXACT_MEMBER_XACT_BITMASK; @@ -1834,8 +1835,8 @@ MultiXactShmemSize(void) mul_size(sizeof(MultiXactId) * 2, MaxOldestSlot)) size = SHARED_MULTIXACT_STATE_SIZE; - size = add_size(size, SimpleLruShmemSize(NUM_MULTIXACTOFFSET_BUFFERS, 0)); - size = add_size(size, SimpleLruShmemSize(NUM_MULTIXACTMEMBER_BUFFERS, 0)); + size = add_size(size, SimpleLruShmemSize(NUM_MULTIXACTOFFSET_BUFFERS)); + size = add_size(size, SimpleLruShmemSize(NUM_MULTIXACTMEMBER_BUFFERS)); return size; } @@ -1851,14 +1852,14 @@ MultiXactShmemInit(void) MultiXactMemberCtl->PagePrecedes = MultiXactMemberPagePrecedes; SimpleLruInit(MultiXactOffsetCtl, - "MultiXactOffset", NUM_MULTIXACTOFFSET_BUFFERS, 0, + "MultiXactOffset", NUM_MULTIXACTOFFSET_BUFFERS, MultiXactOffsetSLRULock, "pg_multixact/offsets", LWTRANCHE_MULTIXACTOFFSET_BUFFER, SYNC_HANDLER_MULTIXACT_OFFSET, false); SlruPagePrecedesUnitTests(MultiXactOffsetCtl, MULTIXACT_OFFSETS_PER_PAGE); SimpleLruInit(MultiXactMemberCtl, - "MultiXactMember", NUM_MULTIXACTMEMBER_BUFFERS, 0, + "MultiXactMember", NUM_MULTIXACTMEMBER_BUFFERS, MultiXactMemberSLRULock, "pg_multixact/members", LWTRANCHE_MULTIXACTMEMBER_BUFFER, SYNC_HANDLER_MULTIXACT_MEMBER, @@ -1933,11 +1934,17 @@ static int ZeroMultiXactOffsetPage(int64 pageno, bool writeXlog) { int slotno; + Page page; + XLogRecPtr lsn = 0; slotno = SimpleLruZeroPage(MultiXactOffsetCtl, pageno); + page = MultiXactOffsetCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]; if (writeXlog) - WriteMZeroPageXlogRec(pageno, XLOG_MULTIXACT_ZERO_OFF_PAGE); + { + lsn = WriteMZeroPageXlogRec(pageno, XLOG_MULTIXACT_ZERO_OFF_PAGE); + PageSetLSN(page, lsn); + } return slotno; } @@ -1949,11 +1956,17 @@ static int ZeroMultiXactMemberPage(int64 pageno, bool writeXlog) { int slotno; + Page page; + XLogRecPtr lsn = 0; slotno = SimpleLruZeroPage(MultiXactMemberCtl, pageno); + page = MultiXactMemberCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]; if (writeXlog) - WriteMZeroPageXlogRec(pageno, XLOG_MULTIXACT_ZERO_MEM_PAGE); + { + lsn = WriteMZeroPageXlogRec(pageno, XLOG_MULTIXACT_ZERO_MEM_PAGE); + PageSetLSN(page, lsn); + } return slotno; } @@ -2071,10 +2084,10 @@ TrimMultiXact(void) MultiXactOffset *offptr; slotno = SimpleLruReadPage(MultiXactOffsetCtl, pageno, true, nextMXact); - offptr = (MultiXactOffset *) MultiXactOffsetCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]; + offptr = (MultiXactOffset *) PageGetContents(MultiXactOffsetCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]); offptr += entryno; - MemSet(offptr, 0, BLCKSZ - (entryno * sizeof(MultiXactOffset))); + MemSet(offptr, 0, CapacityOfPageContents - (entryno * sizeof(MultiXactOffset))); MultiXactOffsetCtl->shared->page_dirty[slotno] = true; } @@ -2104,9 +2117,9 @@ TrimMultiXact(void) memberoff = MXOffsetToMemberOffset(offset); slotno = SimpleLruReadPage(MultiXactMemberCtl, pageno, true, offset); xidptr = (TransactionId *) - (MultiXactMemberCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno] + memberoff); + (PageGetContents(MultiXactMemberCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]) + memberoff); - MemSet(xidptr, 0, BLCKSZ - memberoff); + MemSet(xidptr, 0, CapacityOfPageContents - memberoff); /* * Note: we don't need to zero out the flag bits in the remaining @@ -2758,7 +2771,7 @@ find_multixact_start(MultiXactId multi, MultiXactOffset *result) /* lock is acquired by SimpleLruReadPage_ReadOnly */ slotno = SimpleLruReadPage_ReadOnly(MultiXactOffsetCtl, pageno, multi); - offptr = (MultiXactOffset *) MultiXactOffsetCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]; + offptr = (MultiXactOffset *) PageGetContents(MultiXactOffsetCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]); offptr += entryno; offset = *offptr; LWLockRelease(MultiXactOffsetSLRULock); @@ -3192,12 +3205,12 @@ MultiXactOffsetPrecedes(MultiXactOffset offset1, MultiXactOffset offset2) * Write an xlog record reflecting the zeroing of either a MEMBERs or * OFFSETs page (info shows which) */ -static void +static XLogRecPtr WriteMZeroPageXlogRec(int64 pageno, uint8 info) { XLogBeginInsert(); XLogRegisterData((char *) (&pageno), sizeof(pageno)); - (void) XLogInsert(RM_MULTIXACT_ID, info); + return XLogInsert(RM_MULTIXACT_ID, info); } /* diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/slru.c b/src/backend/access/transam/slru.c index 7a371d9034..d7f3deea7d 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/transam/slru.c +++ b/src/backend/access/transam/slru.c @@ -57,6 +57,7 @@ #include "access/xlogutils.h" #include "miscadmin.h" #include "pgstat.h" +#include "storage/bufpage.h" #include "storage/fd.h" #include "storage/shmem.h" @@ -154,13 +155,13 @@ typedef enum SLRU_WRITE_FAILED, SLRU_FSYNC_FAILED, SLRU_CLOSE_FAILED, + SLRU_DATA_CORRUPTED, } SlruErrorCause; static SlruErrorCause slru_errcause; static int slru_errno; -static void SimpleLruZeroLSNs(SlruCtl ctl, int slotno); static void SimpleLruWaitIO(SlruCtl ctl, int slotno); static void SlruInternalWritePage(SlruCtl ctl, int slotno, SlruWriteAll fdata); static bool SlruPhysicalReadPage(SlruCtl ctl, int64 pageno, int slotno); @@ -179,7 +180,7 @@ static void SlruInternalDeleteSegment(SlruCtl ctl, int64 segno); */ Size -SimpleLruShmemSize(int nslots, int nlsns) +SimpleLruShmemSize(int nslots) { Size sz; @@ -192,9 +193,6 @@ SimpleLruShmemSize(int nslots, int nlsns) sz += MAXALIGN(nslots * sizeof(int)); /* page_lru_count[] */ sz += MAXALIGN(nslots * sizeof(LWLockPadded)); /* buffer_locks[] */ - if (nlsns > 0) - sz += MAXALIGN(nslots * nlsns * sizeof(XLogRecPtr)); /* group_lsn[] */ - return BUFFERALIGN(sz) + BLCKSZ * nslots; } @@ -204,14 +202,13 @@ SimpleLruShmemSize(int nslots, int nlsns) * ctl: address of local (unshared) control structure. * name: name of SLRU. (This is user-visible, pick with care!) * nslots: number of page slots to use. - * nlsns: number of LSN groups per page (set to zero if not relevant). * ctllock: LWLock to use to control access to the shared control structure. * subdir: PGDATA-relative subdirectory that will contain the files. * tranche_id: LWLock tranche ID to use for the SLRU's per-buffer LWLocks. * sync_handler: which set of functions to use to handle sync requests */ void -SimpleLruInit(SlruCtl ctl, const char *name, int nslots, int nlsns, +SimpleLruInit(SlruCtl ctl, const char *name, int nslots, LWLock *ctllock, const char *subdir, int tranche_id, SyncRequestHandler sync_handler, bool long_segment_names) { @@ -219,7 +216,7 @@ SimpleLruInit(SlruCtl ctl, const char *name, int nslots, int nlsns, bool found; shared = (SlruShared) ShmemInitStruct(name, - SimpleLruShmemSize(nslots, nlsns), + SimpleLruShmemSize(nslots), &found); if (!IsUnderPostmaster) @@ -236,7 +233,6 @@ SimpleLruInit(SlruCtl ctl, const char *name, int nslots, int nlsns, shared->ControlLock = ctllock; shared->num_slots = nslots; - shared->lsn_groups_per_page = nlsns; shared->cur_lru_count = 0; @@ -261,12 +257,6 @@ SimpleLruInit(SlruCtl ctl, const char *name, int nslots, int nlsns, shared->buffer_locks = (LWLockPadded *) (ptr + offset); offset += MAXALIGN(nslots * sizeof(LWLockPadded)); - if (nlsns > 0) - { - shared->group_lsn = (XLogRecPtr *) (ptr + offset); - offset += MAXALIGN(nslots * nlsns * sizeof(XLogRecPtr)); - } - ptr += BUFFERALIGN(offset); for (slotno = 0; slotno < nslots; slotno++) { @@ -281,7 +271,7 @@ SimpleLruInit(SlruCtl ctl, const char *name, int nslots, int nlsns, } /* Should fit to estimated shmem size */ - Assert(ptr - (char *) shared <= SimpleLruShmemSize(nslots, nlsns)); + Assert(ptr - (char *) shared <= SimpleLruShmemSize(nslots)); } else Assert(found); @@ -323,11 +313,8 @@ SimpleLruZeroPage(SlruCtl ctl, int64 pageno) shared->page_dirty[slotno] = true; SlruRecentlyUsed(shared, slotno); - /* Set the buffer to zeroes */ - MemSet(shared->page_buffer[slotno], 0, BLCKSZ); - - /* Set the LSNs for this new page to zero */ - SimpleLruZeroLSNs(ctl, slotno); + /* Initialize the page. */ + PageInitSLRU(shared->page_buffer[slotno], BLCKSZ, 0); /* Assume this page is now the latest active page */ shared->latest_page_number = pageno; @@ -338,26 +325,6 @@ SimpleLruZeroPage(SlruCtl ctl, int64 pageno) return slotno; } -/* - * Zero all the LSNs we store for this slru page. - * - * This should be called each time we create a new page, and each time we read - * in a page from disk into an existing buffer. (Such an old page cannot - * have any interesting LSNs, since we'd have flushed them before writing - * the page in the first place.) - * - * This assumes that InvalidXLogRecPtr is bitwise-all-0. - */ -static void -SimpleLruZeroLSNs(SlruCtl ctl, int slotno) -{ - SlruShared shared = ctl->shared; - - if (shared->lsn_groups_per_page > 0) - MemSet(&shared->group_lsn[slotno * shared->lsn_groups_per_page], 0, - shared->lsn_groups_per_page * sizeof(XLogRecPtr)); -} - /* * Wait for any active I/O on a page slot to finish. (This does not * guarantee that new I/O hasn't been started before we return, though. @@ -478,9 +445,6 @@ SimpleLruReadPage(SlruCtl ctl, int64 pageno, bool write_ok, /* Do the read */ ok = SlruPhysicalReadPage(ctl, pageno, slotno); - /* Set the LSNs for this newly read-in page to zero */ - SimpleLruZeroLSNs(ctl, slotno); - /* Re-acquire control lock and update page state */ LWLockAcquire(shared->ControlLock, LW_EXCLUSIVE); @@ -740,7 +704,7 @@ SlruPhysicalReadPage(SlruCtl ctl, int64 pageno, int slotno) ereport(LOG, (errmsg("file \"%s\" doesn't exist, reading as zeroes", path))); - MemSet(shared->page_buffer[slotno], 0, BLCKSZ); + PageInitSLRU(shared->page_buffer[slotno], BLCKSZ, 0); return true; } @@ -763,6 +727,13 @@ SlruPhysicalReadPage(SlruCtl ctl, int64 pageno, int slotno) return false; } + if (!PageIsVerifiedExtended(shared->page_buffer[slotno], pageno, PIV_REPORT_STAT)) + { + slru_errcause = SLRU_DATA_CORRUPTED; + slru_errno = 0; + return false; + } + return true; } @@ -789,6 +760,8 @@ SlruPhysicalWritePage(SlruCtl ctl, int64 pageno, int slotno, SlruWriteAll fdata) off_t offset = rpageno * BLCKSZ; char path[MAXPGPATH]; int fd = -1; + Page page = shared->page_buffer[slotno]; + XLogRecPtr lsn; /* update the stats counter of written pages */ pgstat_count_slru_page_written(shared->slru_stats_idx); @@ -798,41 +771,18 @@ SlruPhysicalWritePage(SlruCtl ctl, int64 pageno, int slotno, SlruWriteAll fdata) * write out data before associated WAL records. This is the same action * performed during FlushBuffer() in the main buffer manager. */ - if (shared->group_lsn != NULL) + lsn = PageGetLSN(page); + if (!XLogRecPtrIsInvalid(lsn)) { /* - * We must determine the largest async-commit LSN for the page. This - * is a bit tedious, but since this entire function is a slow path - * anyway, it seems better to do this here than to maintain a per-page - * LSN variable (which'd need an extra comparison in the - * transaction-commit path). + * As noted above, elog(ERROR) is not acceptable here, so if + * XLogFlush were to fail, we must PANIC. This isn't much of a + * restriction because XLogFlush is just about all critical + * section anyway, but let's make sure. */ - XLogRecPtr max_lsn; - int lsnindex, - lsnoff; - - lsnindex = slotno * shared->lsn_groups_per_page; - max_lsn = shared->group_lsn[lsnindex++]; - for (lsnoff = 1; lsnoff < shared->lsn_groups_per_page; lsnoff++) - { - XLogRecPtr this_lsn = shared->group_lsn[lsnindex++]; - - if (max_lsn < this_lsn) - max_lsn = this_lsn; - } - - if (!XLogRecPtrIsInvalid(max_lsn)) - { - /* - * As noted above, elog(ERROR) is not acceptable here, so if - * XLogFlush were to fail, we must PANIC. This isn't much of a - * restriction because XLogFlush is just about all critical - * section anyway, but let's make sure. - */ - START_CRIT_SECTION(); - XLogFlush(max_lsn); - END_CRIT_SECTION(); - } + START_CRIT_SECTION(); + XLogFlush(lsn); + END_CRIT_SECTION(); } /* @@ -899,6 +849,8 @@ SlruPhysicalWritePage(SlruCtl ctl, int64 pageno, int slotno, SlruWriteAll fdata) } } + PageSetChecksumInplace(shared->page_buffer[slotno], pageno); + errno = 0; pgstat_report_wait_start(WAIT_EVENT_SLRU_WRITE); if (pg_pwrite(fd, shared->page_buffer[slotno], BLCKSZ, offset) != BLCKSZ) @@ -1019,6 +971,13 @@ SlruReportIOError(SlruCtl ctl, int64 pageno, TransactionId xid) errdetail("Could not close file \"%s\": %m.", path))); break; + case SLRU_DATA_CORRUPTED: + ereport(ERROR, + (errcode(ERRCODE_DATA_CORRUPTED), + errmsg("could not access status of transaction %u", xid), + errdetail("Invalid page from file \"%s\" at offset %d.", + path, offset))); + break; default: /* can't get here, we trust */ elog(ERROR, "unrecognized SimpleLru error cause: %d", diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/subtrans.c b/src/backend/access/transam/subtrans.c index 64673eaef6..0e07281979 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/transam/subtrans.c +++ b/src/backend/access/transam/subtrans.c @@ -32,6 +32,7 @@ #include "access/subtrans.h" #include "access/transam.h" #include "pg_trace.h" +#include "storage/bufpage.h" #include "utils/snapmgr.h" @@ -49,7 +50,7 @@ */ /* We need four bytes per xact */ -#define SUBTRANS_XACTS_PER_PAGE (BLCKSZ / sizeof(TransactionId)) +#define SUBTRANS_XACTS_PER_PAGE (CapacityOfPageContents / sizeof(TransactionId)) /* * Although we return an int64 the actual value can't currently exceed @@ -93,7 +94,7 @@ SubTransSetParent(TransactionId xid, TransactionId parent) LWLockAcquire(SubtransSLRULock, LW_EXCLUSIVE); slotno = SimpleLruReadPage(SubTransCtl, pageno, true, xid); - ptr = (TransactionId *) SubTransCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]; + ptr = (TransactionId *) PageGetContents(SubTransCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]); ptr += entryno; /* @@ -133,7 +134,7 @@ SubTransGetParent(TransactionId xid) /* lock is acquired by SimpleLruReadPage_ReadOnly */ slotno = SimpleLruReadPage_ReadOnly(SubTransCtl, pageno, xid); - ptr = (TransactionId *) SubTransCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]; + ptr = (TransactionId *) PageGetContents(SubTransCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]); ptr += entryno; parent = *ptr; @@ -193,14 +194,14 @@ SubTransGetTopmostTransaction(TransactionId xid) Size SUBTRANSShmemSize(void) { - return SimpleLruShmemSize(NUM_SUBTRANS_BUFFERS, 0); + return SimpleLruShmemSize(NUM_SUBTRANS_BUFFERS); } void SUBTRANSShmemInit(void) { SubTransCtl->PagePrecedes = SubTransPagePrecedes; - SimpleLruInit(SubTransCtl, "Subtrans", NUM_SUBTRANS_BUFFERS, 0, + SimpleLruInit(SubTransCtl, "Subtrans", NUM_SUBTRANS_BUFFERS, SubtransSLRULock, "pg_subtrans", LWTRANCHE_SUBTRANS_BUFFER, SYNC_HANDLER_NONE, false); @@ -305,7 +306,6 @@ CheckPointSUBTRANS(void) TRACE_POSTGRESQL_SUBTRANS_CHECKPOINT_DONE(true); } - /* * Make sure that SUBTRANS has room for a newly-allocated XID. * diff --git a/src/backend/commands/async.c b/src/backend/commands/async.c index 264f25a8f9..6b1ff0f515 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/async.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/async.c @@ -140,6 +140,7 @@ #include "libpq/libpq.h" #include "libpq/pqformat.h" #include "miscadmin.h" +#include "storage/bufpage.h" #include "storage/ipc.h" #include "storage/lmgr.h" #include "storage/proc.h" @@ -162,7 +163,7 @@ * than that, so changes in that data structure won't affect user-visible * restrictions. */ -#define NOTIFY_PAYLOAD_MAX_LENGTH (BLCKSZ - NAMEDATALEN - 128) +#define NOTIFY_PAYLOAD_MAX_LENGTH (CapacityOfPageContents - NAMEDATALEN - 128) /* * Struct representing an entry in the global notify queue @@ -311,7 +312,7 @@ static SlruCtlData NotifyCtlData; #define NotifyCtl (&NotifyCtlData) #define QUEUE_PAGESIZE BLCKSZ - +#define QUEUE_PAGE_CAPACITY (QUEUE_PAGESIZE - MAXALIGN(SizeOfPageHeaderData)) #define QUEUE_FULL_WARN_INTERVAL 5000 /* warn at most once every 5s */ /* @@ -492,7 +493,7 @@ AsyncShmemSize(void) size = mul_size(MaxBackends + 1, sizeof(QueueBackendStatus)); size = add_size(size, offsetof(AsyncQueueControl, backend)); - size = add_size(size, SimpleLruShmemSize(NUM_NOTIFY_BUFFERS, 0)); + size = add_size(size, SimpleLruShmemSize(NUM_NOTIFY_BUFFERS)); return size; } @@ -541,7 +542,7 @@ AsyncShmemInit(void) * names are used in order to avoid wraparound. */ NotifyCtl->PagePrecedes = asyncQueuePagePrecedes; - SimpleLruInit(NotifyCtl, "Notify", NUM_NOTIFY_BUFFERS, 0, + SimpleLruInit(NotifyCtl, "Notify", NUM_NOTIFY_BUFFERS, NotifySLRULock, "pg_notify", LWTRANCHE_NOTIFY_BUFFER, SYNC_HANDLER_NONE, true); @@ -1301,14 +1302,14 @@ asyncQueueAdvance(volatile QueuePosition *position, int entryLength) * written or read. */ offset += entryLength; - Assert(offset <= QUEUE_PAGESIZE); + Assert(offset <= QUEUE_PAGE_CAPACITY); /* * In a second step check if another entry can possibly be written to the * page. If so, stay here, we have reached the next position. If not, then * we need to move on to the next page. */ - if (offset + QUEUEALIGN(AsyncQueueEntryEmptySize) > QUEUE_PAGESIZE) + if (offset + QUEUEALIGN(AsyncQueueEntryEmptySize) > QUEUE_PAGE_CAPACITY) { pageno++; offset = 0; @@ -1408,7 +1409,7 @@ asyncQueueAddEntries(ListCell *nextNotify) offset = QUEUE_POS_OFFSET(queue_head); /* Check whether the entry really fits on the current page */ - if (offset + qe.length <= QUEUE_PAGESIZE) + if (offset + qe.length <= QUEUE_PAGE_CAPACITY) { /* OK, so advance nextNotify past this item */ nextNotify = lnext(pendingNotifies->events, nextNotify); @@ -1420,14 +1421,14 @@ asyncQueueAddEntries(ListCell *nextNotify) * only check dboid and since it won't match any reader's database * OID, they will ignore this entry and move on. */ - qe.length = QUEUE_PAGESIZE - offset; + qe.length = QUEUE_PAGE_CAPACITY - offset; qe.dboid = InvalidOid; qe.data[0] = '\0'; /* empty channel */ qe.data[1] = '\0'; /* empty payload */ } /* Now copy qe into the shared buffer page */ - memcpy(NotifyCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno] + offset, + memcpy(PageGetContents(NotifyCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]) + offset, &qe, qe.length); @@ -1947,10 +1948,10 @@ asyncQueueReadAllNotifications(void) else { /* fetch all the rest of the page */ - copysize = QUEUE_PAGESIZE - curoffset; + copysize = QUEUE_PAGE_CAPACITY - curoffset; } - memcpy(page_buffer.buf + curoffset, - NotifyCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno] + curoffset, + memcpy(PageGetContents(page_buffer.buf) + curoffset, + PageGetContents(NotifyCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]) + curoffset, copysize); /* Release lock that we got from SimpleLruReadPage_ReadOnly() */ LWLockRelease(NotifySLRULock); @@ -2021,7 +2022,7 @@ asyncQueueProcessPageEntries(volatile QueuePosition *current, if (QUEUE_POS_EQUAL(thisentry, stop)) break; - qe = (AsyncQueueEntry *) (page_buffer + QUEUE_POS_OFFSET(thisentry)); + qe = (AsyncQueueEntry *) (PageGetContents(page_buffer) + QUEUE_POS_OFFSET(thisentry)); /* * Advance *current over this message, possibly to the next page. As diff --git a/src/backend/storage/lmgr/predicate.c b/src/backend/storage/lmgr/predicate.c index ff8df7c0bc..39129bce98 100644 --- a/src/backend/storage/lmgr/predicate.c +++ b/src/backend/storage/lmgr/predicate.c @@ -204,6 +204,7 @@ #include "pgstat.h" #include "port/pg_lfind.h" #include "storage/bufmgr.h" +#include "storage/bufpage.h" #include "storage/predicate.h" #include "storage/predicate_internals.h" #include "storage/proc.h" @@ -322,8 +323,8 @@ static SlruCtlData SerialSlruCtlData; #define SerialSlruCtl (&SerialSlruCtlData) #define SERIAL_PAGESIZE BLCKSZ -#define SERIAL_ENTRYSIZE sizeof(SerCommitSeqNo) -#define SERIAL_ENTRIESPERPAGE (SERIAL_PAGESIZE / SERIAL_ENTRYSIZE) +#define SERIAL_ENTRYSIZE sizeof(SerCommitSeqNo) +#define SERIAL_ENTRIESPERPAGE (SERIAL_PAGESIZE - MAXALIGN(SizeOfPageHeaderData) / SERIAL_ENTRYSIZE) /* * Set maximum pages based on the number needed to track all transactions. @@ -333,7 +334,7 @@ static SlruCtlData SerialSlruCtlData; #define SerialNextPage(page) (((page) >= SERIAL_MAX_PAGE) ? 0 : (page) + 1) #define SerialValue(slotno, xid) (*((SerCommitSeqNo *) \ - (SerialSlruCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno] + \ + (PageGetContents(SerialSlruCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]) + \ ((((uint32) (xid)) % SERIAL_ENTRIESPERPAGE) * SERIAL_ENTRYSIZE)))) #define SerialPage(xid) (((uint32) (xid)) / SERIAL_ENTRIESPERPAGE) @@ -785,10 +786,13 @@ SerialPagePrecedesLogicallyUnitTests(void) * requires burning ~2B XIDs in single-user mode, a negligible * possibility. Moreover, if it does happen, the consequence would be * mild, namely a new transaction failing in SimpleLruReadPage(). + * + * NOTE: After adding the page header, the defect affects two pages. + * We now assert correct treatment of its second to prior page. */ headPage = oldestPage; targetPage = newestPage; - Assert(SerialPagePrecedesLogically(headPage, targetPage - 1)); + Assert(SerialPagePrecedesLogically(headPage, targetPage - 2)); #if 0 Assert(SerialPagePrecedesLogically(headPage, targetPage)); #endif @@ -808,7 +812,7 @@ SerialInit(void) */ SerialSlruCtl->PagePrecedes = SerialPagePrecedesLogically; SimpleLruInit(SerialSlruCtl, "Serial", - NUM_SERIAL_BUFFERS, 0, SerialSLRULock, "pg_serial", + NUM_SERIAL_BUFFERS, SerialSLRULock, "pg_serial", LWTRANCHE_SERIAL_BUFFER, SYNC_HANDLER_NONE, false); #ifdef USE_ASSERT_CHECKING @@ -1348,7 +1352,7 @@ PredicateLockShmemSize(void) /* Shared memory structures for SLRU tracking of old committed xids. */ size = add_size(size, sizeof(SerialControlData)); - size = add_size(size, SimpleLruShmemSize(NUM_SERIAL_BUFFERS, 0)); + size = add_size(size, SimpleLruShmemSize(NUM_SERIAL_BUFFERS)); return size; } diff --git a/src/backend/storage/page/bufpage.c b/src/backend/storage/page/bufpage.c index 9a302ddc30..4c002490a2 100644 --- a/src/backend/storage/page/bufpage.c +++ b/src/backend/storage/page/bufpage.c @@ -59,6 +59,31 @@ PageInit(Page page, Size pageSize, Size specialSize) /* p->pd_prune_xid = InvalidTransactionId; done by above MemSet */ } +/* + * PageInitSLRU + * Initializes the contents of an SLRU page. + * Note that we don't calculate an initial checksum here; that's not done + * until it's time to write. + */ +void +PageInitSLRU(Page page, Size pageSize, Size specialSize) +{ + PageHeader p = (PageHeader) page; + + specialSize = MAXALIGN(specialSize); + + Assert(pageSize == BLCKSZ); + Assert(pageSize > specialSize + SizeOfPageHeaderData); + + /* Make sure all fields of page are zero, as well as unused space */ + MemSet(p, 0, pageSize); + + p->pd_flags = 0; + p->pd_lower = SizeOfPageHeaderData; + p->pd_upper = pageSize - specialSize; + p->pd_special = pageSize - specialSize; + PageSetPageSizeAndVersion(page, pageSize, PG_METAPAGE_LAYOUT_VERSION); +} /* * PageIsVerifiedExtended diff --git a/src/bin/pg_checksums/pg_checksums.c b/src/bin/pg_checksums/pg_checksums.c index 6543d9ce08..cfbc239843 100644 --- a/src/bin/pg_checksums/pg_checksums.c +++ b/src/bin/pg_checksums/pg_checksums.c @@ -16,6 +16,7 @@ #include <dirent.h> #include <limits.h> +#include <stdbool.h> #include <time.h> #include <sys/stat.h> #include <unistd.h> @@ -589,12 +590,20 @@ main(int argc, char *argv[]) { total_size = scan_directory(DataDir, "global", true); total_size += scan_directory(DataDir, "base", true); + total_size += scan_directory(DataDir, "pg_commit_ts", true); + total_size += scan_directory(DataDir, "pg_multixact", true); + total_size += scan_directory(DataDir, "pg_serial", true); total_size += scan_directory(DataDir, "pg_tblspc", true); + total_size += scan_directory(DataDir, "pg_xact", true); } (void) scan_directory(DataDir, "global", false); (void) scan_directory(DataDir, "base", false); + (void) scan_directory(DataDir, "pg_commit_ts", false); + (void) scan_directory(DataDir, "pg_multixact", false); + (void) scan_directory(DataDir, "pg_serial", false); (void) scan_directory(DataDir, "pg_tblspc", false); + (void) scan_directory(DataDir, "pg_xact", false); if (showprogress) progress_report(true); diff --git a/src/bin/pg_resetwal/t/001_basic.pl b/src/bin/pg_resetwal/t/001_basic.pl index 18d0882cb1..ae74828e44 100644 --- a/src/bin/pg_resetwal/t/001_basic.pl +++ b/src/bin/pg_resetwal/t/001_basic.pl @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ push @cmd, sprintf("%d,%d", hex($files[0]) == 0 ? 3 : hex($files[0]), hex($files[-1])); @files = get_slru_files('pg_multixact/offsets'); -$mult = 32 * $blcksz / 4; +$mult = 32 * ($blcksz - 24) / 4; # -m argument is "new,old" push @cmd, '-m', sprintf("%d,%d", @@ -214,11 +214,11 @@ push @cmd, '-m', hex($files[0]) == 0 ? 1 : hex($files[0] * $mult)); @files = get_slru_files('pg_multixact/members'); -$mult = 32 * int($blcksz / 20) * 4; +$mult = 32 * int(($blcksz - 24) / 20) * 4; push @cmd, '-O', (hex($files[-1]) + 1) * $mult; @files = get_slru_files('pg_xact'); -$mult = 32 * $blcksz * 4; +$mult = 32 * ($blcksz - 24) * 4; push @cmd, '-u', (hex($files[0]) == 0 ? 3 : hex($files[0]) * $mult), '-x', ((hex($files[-1]) + 1) * $mult); diff --git a/src/include/access/slru.h b/src/include/access/slru.h index 091e2202c9..24733166b8 100644 --- a/src/include/access/slru.h +++ b/src/include/access/slru.h @@ -68,17 +68,6 @@ typedef struct SlruSharedData int *page_lru_count; LWLockPadded *buffer_locks; - /* - * Optional array of WAL flush LSNs associated with entries in the SLRU - * pages. If not zero/NULL, we must flush WAL before writing pages (true - * for pg_xact, false for multixact, pg_subtrans, pg_notify). group_lsn[] - * has lsn_groups_per_page entries per buffer slot, each containing the - * highest LSN known for a contiguous group of SLRU entries on that slot's - * page. - */ - XLogRecPtr *group_lsn; - int lsn_groups_per_page; - /*---------- * We mark a page "most recently used" by setting * page_lru_count[slotno] = ++cur_lru_count; @@ -147,8 +136,8 @@ typedef struct SlruCtlData typedef SlruCtlData *SlruCtl; -extern Size SimpleLruShmemSize(int nslots, int nlsns); -extern void SimpleLruInit(SlruCtl ctl, const char *name, int nslots, int nlsns, +extern Size SimpleLruShmemSize(int nslots); +extern void SimpleLruInit(SlruCtl ctl, const char *name, int nslots, LWLock *ctllock, const char *subdir, int tranche_id, SyncRequestHandler sync_handler, bool long_segment_names); diff --git a/src/include/storage/bufpage.h b/src/include/storage/bufpage.h index 424ecba028..251d9523fa 100644 --- a/src/include/storage/bufpage.h +++ b/src/include/storage/bufpage.h @@ -201,6 +201,7 @@ typedef PageHeaderData *PageHeader; * handling pages. */ #define PG_PAGE_LAYOUT_VERSION 4 +#define PG_SLRU_PAGE_LAYOUT_VERSION 1 #define PG_DATA_CHECKSUM_VERSION 1 /* ---------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -257,6 +258,11 @@ PageGetContents(Page page) return (char *) page + MAXALIGN(SizeOfPageHeaderData); } +/* + * Space available for storing page contents. + */ +#define SizeOfPageContents (BLCKSZ - MAXALIGN(SizeOfPageHeaderData)) + /* ---------------- * functions to access page size info * ---------------- @@ -486,6 +492,7 @@ StaticAssertDecl(BLCKSZ == ((BLCKSZ / sizeof(size_t)) * sizeof(size_t)), "BLCKSZ has to be a multiple of sizeof(size_t)"); extern void PageInit(Page page, Size pageSize, Size specialSize); +extern void PageInitSLRU(Page page, Size pageSize, Size specialSize); extern bool PageIsVerifiedExtended(Page page, BlockNumber blkno, int flags); extern OffsetNumber PageAddItemExtended(Page page, Item item, Size size, OffsetNumber offsetNumber, int flags); diff --git a/src/test/modules/test_slru/test_slru.c b/src/test/modules/test_slru/test_slru.c index d0fb9444e8..fea12e0080 100644 --- a/src/test/modules/test_slru/test_slru.c +++ b/src/test/modules/test_slru/test_slru.c @@ -17,6 +17,7 @@ #include "access/slru.h" #include "access/transam.h" #include "miscadmin.h" +#include "storage/bufpage.h" #include "storage/fd.h" #include "storage/ipc.h" #include "storage/shmem.h" @@ -76,8 +77,8 @@ test_slru_page_write(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) TestSlruCtl->shared->page_status[slotno] = SLRU_PAGE_VALID; /* write given data to the page, up to the limit of the page */ - strncpy(TestSlruCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno], data, - BLCKSZ - 1); + strncpy(PageGetContents(TestSlruCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]), data, + CapacityOfPageContents - 1); SimpleLruWritePage(TestSlruCtl, slotno); LWLockRelease(TestSLRULock); @@ -104,7 +105,7 @@ test_slru_page_read(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) LWLockAcquire(TestSLRULock, LW_EXCLUSIVE); slotno = SimpleLruReadPage(TestSlruCtl, pageno, write_ok, InvalidTransactionId); - data = (char *) TestSlruCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]; + data = (char *) PageGetContents(TestSlruCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]); LWLockRelease(TestSLRULock); PG_RETURN_TEXT_P(cstring_to_text(data)); @@ -122,7 +123,7 @@ test_slru_page_readonly(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) pageno, InvalidTransactionId); Assert(LWLockHeldByMe(TestSLRULock)); - data = (char *) TestSlruCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]; + data = (char *) PageGetContents(TestSlruCtl->shared->page_buffer[slotno]); LWLockRelease(TestSLRULock); PG_RETURN_TEXT_P(cstring_to_text(data)); @@ -202,7 +203,7 @@ test_slru_shmem_request(void) prev_shmem_request_hook(); /* reserve shared memory for the test SLRU */ - RequestAddinShmemSpace(SimpleLruShmemSize(NUM_TEST_BUFFERS, 0)); + RequestAddinShmemSpace(SimpleLruShmemSize(NUM_TEST_BUFFERS)); } static bool @@ -238,7 +239,7 @@ test_slru_shmem_startup(void) TestSlruCtl->PagePrecedes = test_slru_page_precedes_logically; SimpleLruInit(TestSlruCtl, "TestSLRU", - NUM_TEST_BUFFERS, 0, TestSLRULock, slru_dir_name, + NUM_TEST_BUFFERS, TestSLRULock, slru_dir_name, test_tranche_id, SYNC_HANDLER_NONE, long_segment_names); } ^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread
end of thread, other threads:[~2023-12-07 07:06 UTC | newest] Thread overview: 24+ messages (download: mbox mbox.gz follow: Atom feed) -- links below jump to the message on this page -- 2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/21] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]> 2023-12-07 07:06 Proposal to add page headers to SLRU pages Li, Yong <[email protected]>
This inbox is served by agora; see mirroring instructions for how to clone and mirror all data and code used for this inbox